Samsung | PS50A550S1R | Samsung PS50A550S1R دليل المستخدم

‫ﺑﺎ ‪ SAMSUNG WORLD-WIDE‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ‪ Samsung‬ﺳﻮﺍﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﻈﺮﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺮﺍﻗﺒﺖ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻱ ‪ SAMSUNG‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Country‬‬
‫‪SOUTH AFRICA‬‬
‫‪U.A.E‬‬
‫‪Customer Care Centre ‬‬
‫)‪0860-SAMSUNG (726 -7864‬‬
‫)‪800-SAMSUNG (726 -7864‬‬
‫‪8000 -4726‬‬
‫‪Web Site‬‬
‫‪www.samsung.com‬‬
‫‪www.samsung.com‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ‪ Samsung‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﻣﺘﺸﻜﺮﱘ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﹰ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫‪ www.samsung.com/global/register‬ﺛﺒﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-00‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:28:57‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 1‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻳﮏ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻳﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ PDP‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﭘﻼﺳﻤﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫”ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ“ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ‪ PDP‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ٢٠٠٠‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺟﺎﻳﻲ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪PDP‬‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﮔﺮﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻮﺭﺍﺥ ﻫﻮﺍﻛﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻟﻤﺲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺮﺣﺬﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ”ﺗﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻖ“ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ”ﺗﻠﻖ ﺗﻠﻖ“ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻘﺒﺾ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﺮﺍﺑﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻠﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ PDP‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻨﻠﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﻭﻱ ‪ (SD-level)١,٢٣٠,٠٠٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (HD-level)٣,١۵٠,٠٠٠‬ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﮑﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﭘﻴﺸﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻴﮕﺮﺍﺩ )‪ ۴١‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ( ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻨﻞ ‪ PDP‬ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ‬
‫ﭼﭗ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺗﺎﺑﺶ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﺪﻣﺎﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻗﺺ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ‪” ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ“ ﻭ ”ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ“ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‬
‫ ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺤﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻧﺼﺐ‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺤﻞ ﭘﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﻭﻏﺒﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻣﺎﻫﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻳﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺷﻴﻤﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻠﻬﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻓﺮﻭﺩﮔﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻗﻄﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﺎﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫© ‪.Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved ٢٠٠٨‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:28:57‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 2‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪٢ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‪۴ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ‪۴ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ‪۵ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪۶ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ‪٨ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ‪٩ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‪٩ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ‪١٠ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪١١ ................................................ TOOLS‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٢ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪١٢ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪١٣ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪١٣ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪١۴ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪١۵ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪١۶ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‪١۶ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٧ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ‪١٧ .............................................‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‪٢٢ ...............‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪٢٩ ............. (Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪٣٠ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪٣١ ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ‪٣٢ ........................................ WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪٣٣ ........................................ WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪٣۴ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪٣٧ .................................................. Mp٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ‪٣٨ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟ ‪۴٠ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪۴٠ ................................................. Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪۴١ ...........................................................Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪۴١ ...................... Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‪۴٢ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪۴٣ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻤﻴﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ‪۴٣ ...........‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ( ‪۴۴ .......................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ‪۴۶ ........................( VESA‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪۴٧ ...........‬‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ( ‪۴٨ ................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‪۴٩ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪۵٠ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ‪٢٢ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ( ‪٢۴ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ)ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ( ‪٢۴ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ‪٢۵ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪/(Language‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪/(Light Effect‬ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ)‪/(Melody‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪/(Entertainment‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪٢۶ ............................. /(Energy Saving‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪٢٨ ........................................ (PIP‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻬﻢ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻛﺮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:28:58‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 3‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻴﺪﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪AAA‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﻧﻲ ‪ /‬ﭘﻴﭻ )ﻫﺮﮐﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ(‬
‫) ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۵۴‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﭘﺎﺭﭼﻪ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﺕ ﺛﺒﺖ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻤﻨﻲ )ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﺤﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪S-Video‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ )ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪(S-Video‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻢ ﻓﺮﻳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻚ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻴﺮﻩ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ‪ PDP‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ‪ PDP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ‪ PDP‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮕﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ‪ PDP‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﭗ ﮔﺮﺩﺵ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪°٢٠ ~ °٢٠-‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:02‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 4‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪SOURCE‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ )‪TV, AV1,‬‬
‫‪) AV2, S-Video‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ(‪) Component1 ,‬ﺟﺰﺀ‪,(١‬‬
‫‪) Component2‬ﺟﺰء‪) PC ,(٢‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ‪HDMI1,‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬ﻭ ‪.(HDMI3‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻄﻮﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪MENU‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪− VOL +‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ − VOL +‬ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ◄ ﻭ ► ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪CH‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﺯﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺴﻮﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:04‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 5‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣ HDMI IN‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ‪ HDMI‬ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢ S-VIDEO) AV IN‬ﻳﺎ ‪(AUDIO R/L / VIDEO‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ S-Video‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (Video‬ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻢ ﻛﻮﺭﺩﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺗﻮﺩﻩ ﺍﻱ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻜﺲ‬
‫)‪ (JPEG‬ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ )‪ (Mp٣‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۶ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:07‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 6‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺒﮑﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺟﻮﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﭘﺎﻳﺎﻧﻪ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ DVI‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ(‪ .‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ‪DVI‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﮐﺪﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫‪)HDCP‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﮐﭙﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻧﻴﺎﻳﺪ ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪١٫٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ ٢ HDMI IN‬ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ‪DVI IN‬‬
‫‪ [R-AUDIO-L] ((HDMI٢‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪/‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‪/‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺯﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺳﻔﺖ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻪ ‪ ١٫٣‬ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻟﺮﺯﺵ ﺁﺯﺍﺭﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVI IN ( HDMI2) AUDIO R/L‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪ DVI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ANT IN‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ ‪ ٧۵Ω‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ‪/‬ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪SERVICE‬‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ‪ electro-motion‬ﻭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪(AUDIO R/L) AUDIO OUT‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١ COMPONENT IN ,٢ COMPONENT IN‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪ (AUDIO R/L‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Y/PB/PR‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪PC IN (PC) /AUDIO‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪(١ AUDIO R/L / VIDEO) AV IN‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ RCA‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ A/V‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﻢ ﮐﻮﺭﺩﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢ ,١ HDMI IN‬‬
‫ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ‪ HDMI‬ﻻﺯﻡ‬‫ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ ٢ HDMI IN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫ »ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ﭼﻨﺪﺭﺳﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ« ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ‬‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﻭ ﺟﺰء‬
‫‪۴٨٠i‬‬
‫‪۴٨٠p‬‬
‫‪۵٧۶i‬‬
‫‪۵٧۶p‬‬
‫‪۵٠Hz HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪۶٠Hz HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫‪X‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١٠٨٠p ١٠٨٠i ٧٢٠p‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:11‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 7‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪POWER‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻳﻚ‪/‬ﺩﻭ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 15‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﻤﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﺯﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪/‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﻜﺚ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ )‪ (JPEG‬ﻭ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)‪ (MP3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪،(JPEG) 34‬‬
‫)‪ MP3) 37‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‪DMA (Digital Media Adapter‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪ Samsung DMA‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ DMA‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺭﻭﺍﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫‪ DMA‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ”‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪» “((HDMI-CEC‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ« ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 41‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪17‬‬
‫ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 44‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺸﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪Fastext‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ /‬ﻣﻴﮑﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻫﺮﺩﻭی‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ )‪LIST/‬‬
‫‪(FLOF‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‬
‫‪: P‬ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:15‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 8‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﭘﺸﺖ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻳﻜﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ‪ AAA‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ ”–“ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻈﻪ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻗﻠﻴﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﮕﻨﺰ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺎﻃﻲ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺧﻨﻚ ﻭ ﺧﺸﻚ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﻓﻮﺕ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ! ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺱ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ؟‬
‫‪ .۴‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﺮﻭﻥ ﻛﺸﻴﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬
‫‪ .۵‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻳﻚ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻬﺘﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻧﺌﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﻲ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؟‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺘﺎژ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ‪ ۵٠‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﺮﺩﻳﺪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ”ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٣‬ﻭﻳﺎ ”ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ“ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١۴‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ”ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ“ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ ١٠‬ﻭ ‪ ١١‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﭘﻨﺞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ ,(Picture‬ﺻﺪﺍ)‪,(Sound‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ ,(Channel‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻭ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪.(Input‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:20‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 9‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻭ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻰ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺻﻠﻰ ﺑﺮﺍﻯ ﻣﺸﺘﺮﻳﺎﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ‪ (Start Plug & Play.)Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪ (Language‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ »ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(Select 'Home use' when installing this TV in your home.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ)‪ (Store Demo‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ )‪(Home use‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺎ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﻢ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﺘﺎﻥ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻐﺎﺯﻩ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ)‪ (Store Demo‬ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺰﻝ)‪) (Home use‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ( ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ :‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪ OSD‬ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ۵‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ)‪ (Area‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻴﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ (Auto Store‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻭ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ (Clock Set‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ)‪ (Stop‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪,(Year‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ ,(Hour‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﻳﺎ ‪ am/pm‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲‬
‫ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪ ,(Year‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪ (Hour‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺄﻳﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪ (Enjoy your viewing).‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺘﻴﻜﻪ ﻛﺎﺭﺗﺎﻥ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫‪English‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫‪Français‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫»ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ« ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﺷﺮﻗﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﮓ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫▼‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫‪C --‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺩﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻩ‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫‪: --‬‬
‫‪----‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪--‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻟﺬﺕ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:24‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 10‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪.Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍء ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )‪ (.Start Plug & Play‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪TOOLS‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ”‪)“TOOLS‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ( ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫‪)TOOLS‬ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲‪ ENTER/►/◄/▼/‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻫﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪ ،(Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ۴١‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ١٧‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٢‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۵‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ ،SRS TS XT‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢٧‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪ ،I-II‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ ٢۴‬ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:26‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 11‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻭﻱ ﺳﻲ ﺁﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭ‬
‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﻲ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ )ﭘﺨﺶ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ( ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Source List‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪,TV, AV١, S-Video ,AV٢, Component١ :‬‬
‫‪ ,Component٢‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪PC), HDMI١, HDMI٢ ,HDMI٣‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪AV١‬‬
‫‪AV٢‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component١‬‬
‫‪Component٢‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ HDMI‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩی‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Edit Name‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻭﻳﺮﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪ ,DVD , (VCR)VCD, /‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ)‪HD‬‬
‫‪,STB,(Cable STB‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ)‪, PVR STB,(Satellite STB‬‬
‫‪ ,AV Receiver‬ﺑﺎﺯی)‪,(Game‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭی)‪,(Camcorder‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ ,(PC‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪DMA, HD DVD, Blu-Ray, IPTV, (TV‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫‪AV1‬‬
‫‪AV2‬‬
‫‪S-Video‬‬
‫‪Component1‬‬
‫‪Component2‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪HDMI1‬‬
‫‪HDMI2‬‬
‫‪HDMI3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪−−−− −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺪﻳﻮ ‪VCD /‬‬
‫‪DVD −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﺎﺑﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ −−−− :‬ﻣﺎﻫﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬
‫‪PVR STB−−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪AV Receiver‬‬
‫‪▼ −−−− :‬‬
‫‪−−−− :‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:29‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 12‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺴﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ )ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺸﻮﺭ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺭﺩﻧﻈﺮ ﻫﻤﺨﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﻙ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ)‪ (Area‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ (Auto Store‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺎﺗﻤﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺑﺸﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی‬
‫ﻏﺮﺑﯽﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی‬
‫ﺭﻭﺳﻴﻪ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﺷﺮﻗﯽ‬
‫ﭼﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮓ ﮐﻨﮓ‪/‬ﺑﺮﻳﺘﺎﻧﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺍﻟﻴﺎ‬
‫ﺯﻻﻧﺪﻧﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻧﺪﻭﻧﺰی‬
‫ﺍﻓﺮﻳﻘﺎی ﺟﻨﻮﺑﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪0 %‬‬
‫‪P 1‬‬
‫‪40MHz‬‬
‫‪C --‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻱ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ)‪ (Manual Store‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪P1:‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪BG :‬‬
‫‪C2:‬‬
‫‪48MHz :‬‬
‫‪:‬؟‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪) (Programme‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ :(Colour System‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪/(Auto‬ﭘﺎﻝ)‪/(PAL‬ﺳﮑﺎﻡ)‪SECAM)/NTSC۴٫۴٣/NTSC٣٫۵٨‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:33‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 13‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ)‪M/I/DK/BG :(BG/DK/I/M‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪) (Channel‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) C‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ( ﻳﺎ ‪) S‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (٩~٠‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻏﻴﺮﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ)‪) (Search‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺗﻮﻧﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ)‪) (Store‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪)OK‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ( ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪) P ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ(‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ‪ P٠٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ P٩٩‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) C ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﻮﺍﻳﻲ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) S ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ(‪ :‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel Manager‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel Manager‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Channel List‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Channel List‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺑﻪ ) ( ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻓﺰﻭﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۴ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:35‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 14‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﻣﺖ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺎﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮﻣﺠﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﻛﻮﺩﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۶‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Child Lock‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ)‪ (Channel List‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﻴﻠﺪ ) ( ﺭﻓﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﻔﻞ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪ (Child Lock‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫‪C4‬‬
‫‪١/١٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫▲‬
‫‪C-‬‬‫‪٠‬‬
‫‪C٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪C ٨٣‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪C ٨٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪C٧‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪C ٨٩‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪C ٩٠‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪C ١١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪C ١٢‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪C ١٣‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫▼‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮ ﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ CH LIST‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ)‪ (Sort‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺵ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﮑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻻﺯﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻘﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪C−−‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۵ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:39‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 15‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﻱ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪−−C‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C2‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪C83‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C80‬‬
‫‪−−−−−‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪−−−−−A‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Name‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ‪ ،‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )ﻧﺘﺎﻳﺞ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‪ ,/ ,* ,- ,+ ,٩~٠ ,A~Z :‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮﻑ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪی ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ ۴‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻭ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ)‪ (Channel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ)‪ (Fine Tune‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺴﺐ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺻﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺧﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ‪) OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ” * “ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺑﻪ ‪ ، ٠‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ (Reset‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‪/‬ﺍﺭﻭﭘﺎی ﻏﺮﺑﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‬
‫‪*P 1‬‬
‫‪+2‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫*‪P 1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫‪−− : −−‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١۶ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:41‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 16‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ (Mode‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪,(Standard‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪) .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪،RF‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰء‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺎ ‪(DVI‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ (Dynamic‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻧﻮﺭ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﻫﺴﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ P.MODE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ ،(Picture Mode‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﺳﻠﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ (Mode‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪,(Standard‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪(Movie‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ)‪ – (Cell Light‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ)‪ – (Contrast‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ)‪ – (Brightness‬ﻭﺿﻮﺡ)‪ – (Sharpness‬ﺭﻧﮓ)‪(Colour‬‬
‫– ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ)‪(Tint‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ AV، S-Video ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ)‪ (Tint‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪)Cell Light‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ(‪)Contrast ،‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ( ﻭ ‪)Brightness‬ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ)‪(OK/Cancel‬‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ)‪ (OK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:44‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 17‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﺗﺼﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ (Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ)‪ ,(Black Adjust‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ ,(Dynamic Contrast‬ﮔﺎﻣﺎ)‪ ,(Gamma‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪White‬‬
‫‪ ,(Balance‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ)‪ ,(Flesh Tone‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ)‪Edge‬‬
‫‪ ,(Enhancement‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ )‪.xvYCC (Colour Space‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ ،(PC‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪Dynamic‬‬
‫‪ ,(Contrast‬ﮔﺎﻣﺎ)‪ ,(Gamma‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ (White Balance‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ)‪ (Detailed Settings‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ)‪ :(Black Adjust‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺳﻴﺎﻫﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ)‪ :(Dynamic Contrast‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺎﻣﺎ)‪٣+ ~ ٣- :(Gamma‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ‪)Auto :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‪)Native/‬ﺑﻮﻣﻲ(‪)Custom/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ(‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ (Colour space‬ﻳﻚ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﻳﺲ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ ﻭ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻋﻼﻗﻪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ)‪ :(Auto‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺑﻮﻣﻲ)‪ :(Native‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺑﻮﻣﻲ ﺗﻦ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻋﻤﻴﻖ ﻭ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪ :(Custom‬ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪R 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪G 50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪0 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻮﻣﻲ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ ﭘﻮﻳﺎ‬
‫ﮔﺎﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ‬
‫‪xvYCC‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﻪ ”‪)“Customizing the Colour Space‬ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ( ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ : (Colour‬ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(Red‬ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(Green‬ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(Blue‬ﺯﺭﺩ)‪/(Yellow‬ﻳﺸﻤﻲ)‪/(Cyan‬ﺳﺮﺥ ﻓﺎﻡ)‪(Magenta‬‬
‫ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ)‪ (Colour Space‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪ (Custom‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪ ، (Red‬ﺳﺒﺰ)‪، (Green‬ﺁﺑﻲ)‪ ،(Blue‬ﺯﺭﺩ)‪ ،(Yellow‬ﻳﺸﻤﻲ)‪ (Cyan‬ﻳﺎ ﺥ ﻓﺎﻡ)‪ (Magenta‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(Red‬ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(Green‬ﺁﺑﻲ)‪ :(Blue‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻧﮓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ‪ RGB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪، (Red‬ﺳﺒﺰ)‪ (Green‬ﻳﺎ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪ ،(Blue‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﻳﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:45‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 18‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ :(White Balance‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(B-Offset‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Gain‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Gain‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪(B-Gain‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Offset‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪/(B-Offset‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ)‪/(R-Gain‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺳﺒﺰ)‪/(G-Gain‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﺁﺑﻲ)‪:(B-Gain‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ :(Reset‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ً‬
‫ﻗﺒﻼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ)‪ :(Edge Enhancement‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺮﺯﻫﺎﻱ ﺷﻴﺊ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﮐﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ)‪١۵+~١۵- :(Flesh Tone‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ◄ ﻭﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﻬﻴﻨﻪ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺎﺯﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :xvYCC‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ‪ /‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )‪(Off/On‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ xvYCC‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ( ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ Component IN‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪ (Picture Mode‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ )‪ (Movie‬ﺑﮕﺬﺍﺭﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪ xvYCC‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺟﺰء ﻳﺎ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﻳﺎ ‪ Component‬ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪١٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:46‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 19‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Picture‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‪)Picture Options‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ‪)Color Tone‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮓ(‪)Size ,‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ( ﻭ ‪)Screen Burn Protection‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ( ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﺩﺭ ‪)Picture Options‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Colour Tone ‬ﺗﻤﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ(‪> Warm٢ :‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪> Warm١ / <٢‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪/ <١‬‬
‫‪> Normal‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ< ‪>Cool١ /‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪> Cool٢ / <١‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﺳﺮﺩ ‪<٢‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪)Dynamic‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ( ﻳﺎ‬
‫‪)Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪)Warm١‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ (١‬ﻭ‬
‫‪)Warm٢‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﮔﺮﻡ ‪ (٢‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫‪16:9 :‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﮐﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫‪)Size ‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‪)Wide Zoom/16:9 :‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪)Zoom/‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ(‪/‬‬
‫‪)Just Scan/۴:٣‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ(‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻳﻲ ﺗﺎﻥ ﻣﻄﺎﺑﻘﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :16:9 −‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ‪ ١۶:٩‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Wide Zoom −‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪ :‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4:3‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ‪ ENTER‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪)Zoom −‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺰﺭگ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :4:3 −‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ 4:3‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Just Scan −‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ(‪ :‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻫﺮﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪/٧٢٠p) HDMI‬‬
‫‪ (١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺟﺰء )‪ (١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ”‪)“Just Scan‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ( ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ (١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i) HDMI‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺟﺰء )‪:(١٠٨٠p/١٠٨٠i‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻭﻳﺎ ◄ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲‪ ► ،▼ ،‬ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪) Reset .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ”‪)“Reset‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪)Just Scan HDMI‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ( ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ AV‬ﺑﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻧﮓ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ‪ (١٠٨٠p) HDMI‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵٠ ،٣٠ ،٢۵ ،٢۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺰء )‪ (١٠٨٠p‬ﺍﺯ ‪ ۵٠‬ﻭ ‪ ۶٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ P.SIZE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻼﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Double‬ﺩﻭﺑﻞ( ) ‪ ( ,‬ﺩﺭ ‪)PIP‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ‪)Picture Size‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ 16:9‬ﻭ ‪ 4:3‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪16:9‬‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬
‫ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫‪4:3‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪)Zoom‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ‪) Off :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) Low /‬ﻛﻢ(‪) Medium /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪) High /‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‪)Auto /‬ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺒﺢ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:48‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 20‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪)Off :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪)Demo/‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‪)On/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪) DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﻬﺘﺮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪)DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪)DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪)DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪)Demo‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﻲ‪)DNIe ،‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DNIeTM‬ﺍﻧﺠﻴﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﺳﻔﻴﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﮕﺮﻳﺘﻢ ﺟﺒﺮﺍﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺮ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮﻱ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ DNIeTM .‬ﻫﺮ‬
‫ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪) DNIe‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Dynamic‬ﭘﻮﻳﺎ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ‪ :HDMI‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﻲ‪/‬ﻛﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ‬
‫ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺸﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ‪ RGB‬ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ )‪ ١۶‬ﺗﺎ‬
‫‪.(٢٣۵‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻪ ‪)HDMI‬ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ (RGB‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Movie Plus ‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﭘﻼﺱ(‪) Off :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪) Low /‬ﻛﻢ(‪) Medium /‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪) High /‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ(‪)Demo /‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ(‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻮﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺤﻨﻪ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Wide Zoom‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ(‪)Zoom ,‬ﺑﺰﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ( ﻭ ‪)Just Scan‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ( ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)PC‬ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Blue Only Mode ‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﺑﻲ(‪)Off / On :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ(‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺼﻴﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ ﻭ ﺳﺒﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪Blue‬‬
‫‪)Filter‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪)Colour‬ﺭﻧﮓ( ﻭ ‪)Tint‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪)Colour‬ﺭﻧﮓ( ﻭ ‪)Tint‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺭﻧﮓ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪Blue‬‬
‫‪)Filter‬ﻓﻴﻠﺘﺮ ﺁﺑﻲ( ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﮕﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮓ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﺁﺑﻲ‪/‬ﻳﺸﻤﻲ‪/‬ﺳﺮﺥ ﻓﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺯﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Blue Only Mode‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺑﻲ( ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪)Movie‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ( ﻳﺎ‪)Standard‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫(ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻈﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻛﺎﻫﺶ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻮﺧﺘﮕﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺠﻬﺰ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ‪/‬ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ )ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ( ﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ )ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ( ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺭﻳﺰﻱ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Pixel Shift −‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ(‪ :‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺩﺭ ‪ PDP‬ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺑﺮﺳﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ‪)Pixel Shift‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫‪)On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪)Horizontal Dot :‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻓﻘﻲ(‪)Vertical Line ,‬ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ(‪)Time ,‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ;‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪/AV/‬ﺟﺰء‪ HDMI/DTV/‬ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪Horizontal Dot‬‬
‫>ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ<‬
‫‪Vertical Line‬‬
‫>ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ<‬
‫)‪Time (minute‬‬
‫>ﺯﻣﺎﻥ)ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ(<‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺳﻔﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻭﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﯽ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪4:‬‬
‫‪4:‬‬
‫‪ 4 :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪>Pixel Shift‬ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﻳﻲ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ< ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ )ﺍﻳﻨﭻ( ﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Just Scan‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ( ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:50‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 21‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ :(White‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻧﮓ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻭﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ)‪ :(Scrolling‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﻤﻪ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ PDP‬ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﮕﻮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻛﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺻﺎً ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺣﺎﺷﻴﻪ ﺧﺎﻛﺴﺘﺮﻱ)‪ :(Side Gray‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ 4:3‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻴﺮﻩ)‪ :(Dark‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ :(Light‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ‪ ۴:٣‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ)‪ (White‬ﻳﺎ ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻭﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ)‪ (Scrolling‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮﭼﻪ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﻜﺮﻭﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ)‪ (Scrolling‬ﻣﻮﺛﺮﺗﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ( ﺗﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺛﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﺎﻳﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻜﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻟﻐﻮ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺖ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺿﻬﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ‪...‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ)‪ ,(Reset‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ)‪ (OK‬ﻳﺎ ﻟﻐﻮ)‪ (Cancel‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻐﻮ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ)‪ (Sound‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ ,(Mode‬ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ)‪, SRS TS XT, (Equalizer‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ ,(Auto Volume‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪,(TV Speaker‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪(Sound Select‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ)‪ : (Mode‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ /(Standard‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ)‪ / (Music‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ / (Movie‬ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ)‪ / (Speech‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪(Custom‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﺛﺮ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻳﻚ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ)‪ (Standard‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ)‪ (Music‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﮐﻨﺴﺮﺕ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﯽ)‪ (Movie‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺨﻨﺮﺍﻧﯽ)‪ (Speech‬ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﺳﺖ )ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﺧﺒﺎﺭ( ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ) ‪ (Custom‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺗﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Sound Mode‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻭ ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:52‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 22‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ)‪:(Equalizer‬‬
‫‪١٠٠Hz Balance/٣٠٠Hz/١kHz/٣kHz/١٠kHz‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻴﺪﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪+‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫‪٠‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﭗ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‬‫‬‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ )‪/٣٠٠Hz/١kHz/٣kHz/١٠kHz‬‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫‪:(١٠٠Hz‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻱ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﺑﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ)‪ (Custom‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :SRS TS XT ‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﻜﻨﻮﻟﻮژﻱ ‪ SRS‬ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﺸﻜﻞ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻀﻤﻮﻥ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ‪ ۵٫١‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﺣﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround‬ﻳﻚ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﺯﻱ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﻭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮ ﻛﻪ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭼﻨﺪﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻪ ً‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻼ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺍﮐﻮﻻﻳﺰﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻻﻧﺲ‬
‫‪100Hz 300Hz 1KHz 3KHz 10KHz‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻱ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT، SRS‬ﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ‬
‫‪ TruSurround XT technology‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺟﻮﺍﺯ ﺍﺯ ‪ .SRS Labs, Inc‬ﺑﻪ ﺛﺒﺖ ﺭﺳﻴﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪..‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪..‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ SRS TS XT‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ >‪ <On‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ >‪ <Off‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻭ ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﺪﺍی ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪ :(Auto Volume‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﮕﺎﻩ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﻲ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻟﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﻋﻮﺽ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﺟﺎﺯﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻛﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﻭﻻﺳﻴﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪ :(TV Speaker‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ /‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﺸﻨﻮﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻟﻐﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ MUTE‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪ (TV Speaker‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪-‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪» (TV Speaker‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ« ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪(Sound Select‬‬
‫)ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﺪﺍ )‪ :(Sound Select‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪/‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )‪(Main/Sub‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ‪ PIP‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ )ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‪ :‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:54‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 23‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ DUAL I-II‬ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪/‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ”‪ “ DUAL-I‬ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ“ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Dual I-II‬ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪ (I-II‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻭ ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ )ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ‪ +‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻱ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫↔‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮﻱ ‪NICAM‬‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫↔‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫‪ NICAM‬ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II/I‬‬
‫‪A٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ‪١‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﺎ ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II/I‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I‬‬
‫↔‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫↔‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪NICAM‬‬
‫←‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫←‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﻧﻮ ‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ )ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪II‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻧﻮﻱ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ(‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﺑﺪﺗﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ)‪ (Mono‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻨﻴﺪﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﻨﮕﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻧﻮ)‪ (Mono‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻫﺎ)ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺭﺳﺪ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﺰﺍﺣﻤﺖ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ”ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ“>‪ <Auto Volume‬ﻭ ”ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ“>‪) <Sound Select‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻗﻮﻩ ﺷﻨﻮﺍﻳﻲ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺑﺰﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻫﺎ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺷﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﮔﻮﺷﻲ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۴ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:55‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 24‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Time‬ﺯﻣﺎﻥ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪,(Clock Set‬‬
‫‪)Sleep Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ(‪)١ Timer ,‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪)٢ Timer ,(١‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪,(٢‬‬
‫‪)٣ Timer‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪(٣‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪3‬‬
‫‪am :‬‬
‫‪ −− : −−‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ>‪<Clock Set‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺎﻳﻠﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺭﻭﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻝ‪،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ,‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‪ ,‬ﻳﺎ ‪am/pm‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺎﻩ)‪ ,(Month‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ)‪ ,(Day‬ﺳﺎﻝ)‪, (Year‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ)‪(Hour‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ)‪ (Minute‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﻭﺯ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﺎک ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ >‪<Sleep Timer‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺘﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ‪ ٣٠‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ١٨٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﭙﺮﻯ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ )ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪ (١٨٠ ,١۵٠ ,١٢٠ ,٩٠ ,۶٠ ,٣٠ ,‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ )‪ (Sleep Timer‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻭﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ / ١‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪ / ٢‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪(Timer1 / Timer2 / Timer3) ٣‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ −‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺁﻳﺘﻢ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪ : (On Time‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪am/pm‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ )‪ : (Off Time‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ‪am/pm‬ﻭ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺑﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪A‬ﺷﺪ‬
‫‪00 : 00‬‬
‫‪am‬‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻝ‪A‬ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻜﺒﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۵ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:58‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 25‬‬
‫‪) Repeat‬ﺗﮑﺮﺍﺭ(‪ :‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ)‪ ,(Once‬ﻫﺮ ﺭﻭﺯ)‪ ,(Everyday‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﺟﻤﻌﻪ)‪ ,(Mon - Fri‬ﺩﻭﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﺷﻨﺒﻪ)‪ ,(Mon - Sat‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺷﻨﺒﻪ ~ ﻳﻜﺸﻨﺒﻪ)‪ (Sat - Sun‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ )‪ :(Volume‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ )‪ :(Programme‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪)On Time‬ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎً ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﻭ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪)Auto Power Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ(‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﺍ ”ﺭﻭﺷﻦ“ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻇﺮﻑ ‪ ٣‬ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻴﭻ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻟﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻧﻜﻴﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ‪>On‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ< ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﮔﺮﻡ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺕ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﻴﺮﻱ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪/(Language‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪/(Light Effect‬ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ)‪/(Melody‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪/(Entertainment‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪/(Energy Saving‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺯﺑﺎﻥ)‪(Language‬‬
‫ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪ :(Light Effect‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪/(Off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ)‪/(In Standby‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪/(In Watching TV‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪(Always‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ‪ LED‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﻃﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ‪LED‬‬
‫ﭼﺸﻤﺎﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ LED: (Off‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ )‪ LED :(In Standby‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪ LED :(In Watching TV‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬‫ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ )‪ LED :(Always‬ﺁﺑﻲ ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ)‪ (Light Effect‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺍﻧﺮژﻱ ﺭﺍ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻠﻮﺩی)‪ :(Melody‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻳﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MUTE‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫()ﺻﺪﺍ( ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ)‪ (Sleep Timer‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢۶ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 26‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪ :(Entertainment‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪/(Off‬ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ)‪/(Sports‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ)‪/(Cinema‬ﺑﺎﺯی)‪(Game‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ :(Off‬ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪ (Entertainment‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ)‪ :(Sports‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻳﺪﺍﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺭﺯﺷﻲ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻳﻲ)‪ :(Cinema‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻏﻨﻲ ﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩﻳﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺑﺎﺯی)‪ :(Game‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺍﻳﺪﻩ ﺁﻝ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﻫﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻨﺴﻮﻝ ﺑﺎﺯﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ‬‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪ (Entertainment‬ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Picture‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ( ﻭ ‪)Sound‬ﺻﺪﺍ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)Entertainment‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﺮ ﻛﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪)Entertainment‬ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ( ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻨﻈﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ)‪ (Entertainment‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﺮ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ :(Energy Saving‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ /(Off‬ﮐﻢ)‪ /(Low‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ /(Medium‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪(High‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﻧﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ :(Off‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی)‪ (Energy Saving‬ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﮐﻢ)‪ :(Low‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ)‪ :(Medium‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ)‪ :(High‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺻﺮﻓﻪ ﺟﻮﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی >‪ ،<Energy Saving‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻭﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺩﻭﮔﺎﻧﻪ ‪I-II‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻧﻮ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:29:59‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 27‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(PIP‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻫﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪۶‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)PIP‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ(ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪)PIP :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ(‪ ,‬ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ)‪ ,(Source‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪,(Size‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪ ,(Position‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪ :(PIP‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‪/‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪(On/Off‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ‬
‫‪Component1, 2‬‬
‫‪HDMI1, 2, 3‬‬
‫‪PC‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪P 1:‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪AV2, AV1 ,‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ )‪Source) :AV٢/TV/AV١‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺂﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪:(Size‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺻﻠﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﻭ ﺟﺰء)‪ (Component‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ)‪ (Size‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪:(Position‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﺑﻞ ) ‪ ، ,‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪ (Position‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ)‪(Programme‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ)‪ (Source‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪(TV‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:01‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 28‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺮﻡ ﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ )ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺨﻪ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﻳﺪﺋﻮﻱ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻲ ﺣﺘﻲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻲ ﺑﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻣﻲ ﺁﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺭﻓﺖ‪) .‬ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ‪ Samsung‬ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﺳﮏ ﺗﺎپ ﻭﻳﻨﺪﻭﺯ ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Properties‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Display Properties‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Settings‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪Display‬‬
‫‪ ،Modes‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻛﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪)Colours‬ﺭﻧﮓ ﻫﺎ( ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ Advanced‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻚ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮔﻔﺘﮕﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‬
‫ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ ‪ Monitor‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ‪ Screen refresh rate‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪Vertical‬‬
‫‪ Frequency‬ﻭ ‪ Horizontal Frequency‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ ﺑﺠﺎﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ‬
‫‪ Screen refresh rate‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺑﺴﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ‪ OK‬ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ OK‬ﮐﻠﻴﮏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺎ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ‪ Properties‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻟﺤﻈﻪ ﺑﻮﺕ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٢٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:01‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 29‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻜﺶ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪D-Sub‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪IBM‬‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪CEA‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫‪640x350‬‬
‫‪720x400‬‬
‫‪640x480‬‬
‫‪640x480‬‬
‫‪640x480‬‬
‫‪800x600‬‬
‫‪800x600‬‬
‫‪800x600‬‬
‫‪1024x768‬‬
‫‪1024x768‬‬
‫‪1024x768‬‬
‫‪1280x1024‬‬
‫‪1280x1024‬‬
‫‪1360x768‬‬
‫‪1600x1200‬‬
‫‪1920x1080RB‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.861‬‬
‫‪37.500‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.077‬‬
‫‪46.875‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪56.476‬‬
‫‪60.023‬‬
‫‪63.981‬‬
‫‪79.976‬‬
‫‪47.712‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪66.587‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪70.086‬‬
‫‪70.087‬‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪72.809‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪72.188‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪70.069‬‬
‫‪75.029‬‬
‫‪60.020‬‬
‫‪75.025‬‬
‫‪60.015‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪59.934‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪28.322‬‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪31.500‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪50.000‬‬
‫‪49.500‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪78.750‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪135.000‬‬
‫‪85.000‬‬
‫‪162.000‬‬
‫‪138.500‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ )‪(H/V‬‬
‫‪+/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ‪HDMI/DVI‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫‪VESA‬‬
‫‪CEA‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ‬
‫‪640x480‬‬
‫‪800x600‬‬
‫‪1024x768‬‬
‫‪1280x1024‬‬
‫‪1360x768‬‬
‫‪1600x1200‬‬
‫‪1920x1080p‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺍﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻛﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪31.469‬‬
‫‪37.879‬‬
‫‪48.363‬‬
‫‪63.981‬‬
‫‪47.712‬‬
‫‪75.000‬‬
‫‪67.500‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫)ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪59.940‬‬
‫‪60.317‬‬
‫‪60.004‬‬
‫‪60.020‬‬
‫‪60.015‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫‪60.000‬‬
‫ﻓﺮﻛﺎﻧﺲ ﺳﺎﻋﺖ ﭘﻴﻜﺴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﮕﺎﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬
‫‪25.175‬‬
‫‪40.000‬‬
‫‪65.000‬‬
‫‪108.000‬‬
‫‪85.500‬‬
‫‪162.000‬‬
‫‪148.500‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺖ ﻫﻤﮕﺎﻡ )‪(H/V‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/‬‬‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪+/+‬‬
‫‪-/+‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI/DVI‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ ٢ HDMI IN‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﻫﻢ ﺑﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ ﻳﻚ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﻏﻴﺮﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺮﻛﺐ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ SOG .‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﻲ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-18 ¿ÀÈÄ 5:31:39‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E_Per_0314.indd 30‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ)‪ (PC‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪. SOURCE‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ)‪(Picture‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪,(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ)‪(Screen‬‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺷﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪(Auto Adjustment‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﮐﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﺭﻳﺰ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺷﺖ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪) Auto Adjustment‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ)‪ :(Screen‬ﺧﺸﻦ)‪ /(Fine)/ (Coarse‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪ /(Position‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪(Image Reset‬‬
‫ ﺧﺸﻦ)‪(Fine)/ (Coarse‬‬‫ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻳﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺻﺮﻓﺎً ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﮐﺮﺩﻩ )ﺩﺭﺷﺖ( ﻭ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻨﮑﻪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﺯﻳﺖ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺮﮐﺰ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺸﻦ)‪ (Coarse‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Fine‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺍﺭﻫﺎﻱ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ)‪(Position‬‬‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮔﻴﺮﺩ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ١‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲‪ ►/◄/▼/‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪-‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ)‪:(Image Reset‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺳﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﯽ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﯽ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺟﺰﻳﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺻﺒﺮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪(Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺻﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻳﻤﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫‪SRS TS XT‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺸﻦ‬
‫‪Fine‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﺠﺪﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:04‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 31‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ‪WISELINK‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺳﺎﺯﺩ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ )‪ (JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ )‪ (Mp3‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی )‪ (MSC‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﻛﻨﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺟﻠﻮی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﮏ ‪ USB‬ﺣﺎﻭی ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮی ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺻﻮﺗﯽ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻳﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪) WISELINK‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ (USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﻴﭻ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ )ﻋﮑﺲ ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ( ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ FAT16/32‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ NTFS‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ)‪ USB Mass Storage Class(MSC‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ MSC .‬ﻧﻮﻋﯽ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻫﺎی ‪ MSC‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﻨﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﻮﻫﺎی ‪ Thumb‬ﻭ ‪) .Flash Card Reader‬ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB HDD‬ﻭ‪ HUB‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪(.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﺑﺰﺍﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻥ ﺗﻬﻴﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﺯ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻥ ﺩﻳﺘﺎی ﺧﻮﺩ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﺎﻣﺴﻮﻧﮓ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻗﺒﺎﻝ ﻫﺮ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻳﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻫﺎی ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﺮ ﻋﻬﺪﻩ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺯﻭﻟﻮﺷﻦ ‪ 6‬ﻣﮕﺎ ﭘﻴﮑﺴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻄﻔﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی ‪ USB‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪ USB‬ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺟﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭی‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ‪ Mp3‬ﻭ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪Mp3‬ﻫﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﺑﺎﻻ )ﻣﺜﻼ ﻓﺮﮐﺎﻧﺲ ﻫﺎی ‪ 1/44 ، 32‬ﻳﺎ ‪ 48‬ﮐﻴﻠﻮﻫﺮﺗﺰ( ﺭﺍ ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻪ ﻣﯽ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻴﻨﺪ‪ JPEG .‬ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪی ﺣﺎﻓﻈﻪ ﺑﺴﻴﺎﺭی ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻴﺴﺮ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ "ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی" ﺍﺯ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ)‬
‫(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻴﭽﻴﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺘﻬﺎی )‪ PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol‬ﻭ ﻧﻴﺰ )‪ MTP (Media Transfer Protocol‬ﭘﺸﺘﻴﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺍﺟﺮﺍی ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ '‪ '00:00:00‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺮ ﭼﻪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮی ﺻﺮﻑ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 5000‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻤﻮﺩی ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ 4000‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺭﻣﺰﮔﺸﺎﻳﯽ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻋﻜﺲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﺎ ‪ 300‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:05‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 32‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫ﻧﺎﻣﮕﺬﺍﺭی ﻭﺭﻭﺩیﻫﺎ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪WISELINK‬‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ USB‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺘﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ WISELINK‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻳﮏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺍی ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺧﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺪﻫﺎی ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻫﺎی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp٣‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﯽ ﻳﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻨﯽ )ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ(‬
‫ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:08‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 33‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1‬ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪38‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫‪ .2‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER ,‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ► ،▼ ،▲ .3‬ﻭ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Page 1/10‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪KB 53‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪14 / 1‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺑﺎﺭﮔﻴﺮی ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻴﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫)‬
‫( ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻗﺪﺭی ﺯﻣﺎﻧﺒﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎﻳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻴﻮﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ‪ jpeg‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺖ ﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ‪ bmp‬ﻳﺎ ‪ tiff‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪ 15‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﻪ پ=ﺍﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 15‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﮔﺬﺍﺭی ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ USB‬ﺩﻭﺭﺑﻴﻦ ﻫﺎی ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ JPEG‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻞ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﺁﻥ ﺯﻭﻡ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﭽﺮﺧﺎﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺩﻳﮕﺮی ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪ EXIF‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻴﻔﻴﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﻳﺮ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ‪PHOTO LIST‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ )‪ Start Slide Show‬ﻳﺎ ‪ (Select All‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ‪ Start Slide Show‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ‬
‫‪ Background Music‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﻭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﺎﻳﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ USB‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬
‫)‪(List, Background Music Setting, Background Music, Slide Show Speed‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۴ -‬‬
‫‪2002-01-05 ¿ÀÈÄ 8:47:26‬‬
‫‪Page 1/10‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪KB 53‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪14 / 1‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Select All‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫► ‪Slide Show Speed : Normal‬‬
‫► ‪Background Music : Off‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E_Per_0314.indd 34‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ‬
‫‪:Slide Show Speed‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ )‪ (Fast, Normal, Slow‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fast‬‬
‫‪Normal‬‬
‫‪Slow‬‬
‫‪► Slide Show Speed : Normal‬‬
‫‪► Background Music : On‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪: Background Music‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ )‪ (On، Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪► Slide Show Speed : Normal‬‬
‫‪► Background Music : On‬‬
‫‪Background Music Setting‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪:Background Music Setting‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻳﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻼﻳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫◄◄ ‪►► Page 1/1‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪:List‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ JPEG‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Page 1/10‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪KB 53‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪14 / 1‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻋﮑﺲ ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺎﺭی )ﻣﺜﻼ ﺩﻫﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺎﻧﺰﺩﻩ ﻋﮑﺲ( ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Page 1/10‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪None‬‬
‫‪File 2‬‬
‫‪Photo 0001‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪KB 53‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪14 / 1‬‬
‫‪File 8‬‬
‫‪File 7‬‬
‫‪File 6‬‬
‫‪File 5‬‬
‫‪File 4‬‬
‫‪File 13‬‬
‫‪File 12‬‬
‫‪File 11‬‬
‫‪File 10‬‬
‫‪File 9‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻋﮑﺲ‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪400x340‬‬
‫‪KB 53‬‬
‫‪May 1, 2007‬‬
‫‪14 / 1‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻮﻧﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۵ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:16‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 35‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪33‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Photo‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER ,‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲‪ ► ،▼ ،‬ﻭ ◄ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﮑﺲ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ‬
‫)‪ (List, Rdtate, Zoom, Start Slide Show‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Zoom‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻋﻤﮑﺲ ﺑﺰﺭﮔﺘﺮ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(X4 → X2 → X1‬‬
‫ ‪ : X1‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺮﺩﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ‪ : X2‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺮ ‪.x2‬‬‫ ‪ : X4‬ﺯﻭﻡ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ‪.x4‬‬‫‪ ‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ▲‪ ► ،▼ ،‬ﻭ ◄‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate/Start Slide Show‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Rotate‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻫﺮ ﺑﺎﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺯﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﮑﺲ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ ‪ : 0º‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 90º‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 180º‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 180‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ ‪ : 270º‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻋﮑﺲ ﺭﺍ ‪ 270‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻣﯽ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪ‬‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﭼﺮﺧﻴﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺳﺎﺯی ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Zoom/Start Slide Show‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪ Rotate‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﯽ‬
‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪X1‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪► Zoom‬‬
‫‪► Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪X1‬‬
‫‪X2‬‬
‫‪X4‬‬
‫‪X1‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪Zoom‬‬
‫‪► Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪90º‬‬
‫‪180º‬‬
‫‪270º‬‬
‫‪X1‬‬
‫‪0º‬‬
‫‪Start Slide Show‬‬
‫‪► Zoom‬‬
‫‪► Rotate‬‬
‫‪List‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣۶ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:17‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 36‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪Mp٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ‪ USB‬ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.1‬‬
‫‪.2‬‬
‫‪.3‬‬
‫‪.4‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 3‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪) .‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪33‬ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ(‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ‪ Music‬ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‪ ENTER ,‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻳﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﺍﻍ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻭﻳﺪ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﻳﮏ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﻴﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REW‬ﻳﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ FF‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻳﺎ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍی ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ‪Play،‬‬
‫‪ Repeat Music‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Select All‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ WISELINK‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ W.LINK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪CELLDISK2.0‬‬
‫‪315MB/495MB Free‬‬
‫‪Setup‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Photo‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Nat King Cole-Fly me to the moon‬‬
‫‪00:04:00‬‬
‫‪Music‬‬
‫‪Upper Folder‬‬
‫‪Folder 1‬‬
‫‪Swan Song feat.TBNY 001‬‬
‫‪00:04:01‬‬
‫‪00:04:28‬‬
‫‪Beatles-Yesterday 002‬‬
‫‪00:04:12‬‬
‫‪Fall in Love 003‬‬
‫‪Tom Waits-Time 004‬‬
‫‪00:05:39‬‬
‫‪Chuk Mangione-Feel So good 005‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪Nat King Cole-Fly me to the moon 006‬‬
‫‪00:05:25‬‬
‫‪Ryuichi Sakamoto-Rain 007‬‬
‫‪00:04:30‬‬
‫‪Bon jovi-This ain’t a love song 008‬‬
‫‪00:03:54‬‬
‫‪Return‬‬
‫‪Option‬‬
‫‪KB 5959‬‬
‫‪Nov 14, 2007‬‬
‫‪6/14‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫‪Move‬‬
‫‪Play‬‬
‫‪Repeat Music‬‬
‫‪Select All‬‬
‫‪Off ‬‬
‫‪Select‬‬
‫‪Exit‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﯽ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
‫‪:Play‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪Mp3‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Mp3‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻧﻮﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ Mp3‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﺩﺍﺭﺍی ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﺣﺘﯽ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫‪ USB‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﻴﺎﻝ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ +‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍی ﻗﻄﻊ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ MUTE‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ FF‬ﻳﺎ ‪ REW‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Repeat Music‬‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﮑﺮﺭ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ‪ Mp3‬ﺩﺭﻭﻥ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی ‪ On‬ﻳﺎ ‪ Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﯽ ﻓﺎﻳﻠﻬﺎی ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ PLAY/PAUSE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ STOP‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺩﻫﻴﻢ ‪ .‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻣﺠﺪﺩﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ‬
‫‪ Stop‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﻻی ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪٣٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:24‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ‬
.‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬WISELINK ‫ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬Setup
Photo
Music
Setup
Return
Enter
Slide Show Speed
: Normal
Background Music
: On
Move
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
: On
Screen Saver
: 5min.
Return
Slide Show Speed
Background Music
Background Music Setting
Enter
Slow
: On
Screen Saver
: 5min.
Return
Enter
Slide Show Speed
: Fast
Background Music
: On
Off
Background Music Setting
Repeat Music
On
: On
Screen Saver
: 5min.
Return
Enter
.1
.2
.3
.4
Move
Normal ‫ ﻳﺎ‬Fast
: Fast
Fast
: On
Normal
Repeat Music
‫ )ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺗﮑﻤﻴﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬WISELINK ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬3 ‫ ﺗﺎ‬1 ‫ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ‬
(‫ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬33
‫ ﺭﺍ‬ENTER ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬،‫ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ‬Setup ‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ► ﻳﺎ ◄ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺭﺍ‬ENTER ‫ﺑﺎ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎی ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
Background Music, Slide Show Speed) .‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
Repeat Music, Background Music Setting
(Screen Saver
ENTER ‫ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬،‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻣﺪﻧﻈﺮﺗﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺳﻴﺪ‬
.‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬W.LINK ‫ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬WISELINK ‫ﺑﺮﺍی ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬
.‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‬
:Slide Show Speed
‫ ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻫﺎی‬.‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﺮﺍی ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻴﻨﺪ‬Slow ‫ﻳﺎ‬
Move
: Background Music
.‫ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ ﻳﺎ ﺧﻴﺮ‬Mp3 ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
.‫ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬On ‫ ﻳﺎ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬Off ‫ﻣﯽ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ‬
Move
:Background Music Setting
‫ ﺑﺮﺍی ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﻭ‬Background Music Setting ‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻳﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺍﺳﻼﻳﺪ ﺍﺯ‬
.‫ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺯﻣﻴﻨﻪ‬Mp3 ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬.‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
►► Page 1/1 ◄◄
Move
Enter
Return
...‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬
٣٨ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01447E-Per.indb 38
2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:26
:(‫ )ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ‬Music Repeat
Fast :
‫ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻮﺷﻪ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﭘﺨﺶ‬Mp٣ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺁﻳﺎ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
.‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬،‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
Slide Show Speed
On :
Background Music
Background Music Setting
On :
OffRepeat Music
min ۵ :
OnScreen Saver
Return
Fast :
Enter
Move
:Screen Saver
،1 ‫ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ‬.‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﭘﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﺍﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
.‫ ﻣﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺪﻳﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ‬،‫ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺍی ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‬10 ‫ ﻳﺎ‬5
Slide Show Speed
On :
Background Music
Background Music Setting
On :
Repeat Music
min ۵ :
Screen Saver
1 min.
5 min.
10 min.
Return
Enter
Move
٣٩ - ‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ‬
BN68-01447E-Per.indb 39
2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:27
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﭼﻴﺴﺖ؟‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻳﮏ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﺷﺒﮑﻪ ‪ AV‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺭﺍﺑﻂ ‪ AV‬ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻫﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ Samsung Electronics AV‬ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ‪ AV‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ AV‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ١‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٢‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ١‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+ ٣‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ]‪HDMI] ،[١ IN HDMI‬‬
‫‪ [٢IN‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [٣ IN HDMI‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI IN‬ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻭ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪ HDMI OUT‬ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ]‪HDMI] ،[١ IN HDMI‬‬
‫‪ [٢IN‬ﻳﺎ ]‪ [٣ IN HDMI‬ﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ‪HDMI OUT‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪١٫٣ HDMI‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﻛﻪ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺍﻛﺜﺮ ‪ ٨‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ AV‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:28‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 40‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻭﺭﻭﺩی)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ )‪ (Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻭﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪ The Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ)‪ (Off‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) ،‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Off :‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪Off :‬‬
‫ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫‪ ۴‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ)‪(Auto Turn Off‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫‪ ۵‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺑﻠﻪ)‪ (Yes‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪Off :‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻴﺮ‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪)Auto turn off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺧﻴﺮ)‪ (No‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪)Auto turn off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﻟﻐﻮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ‪)Auto Turn Off‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻪ)‪ (Yes‬ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻧﻴﺰ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ )‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻏﻴﺮﻓﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ)‪ (Input‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVDR1‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ )‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪DVDR2‬‬
‫‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪DVD1‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Select Device‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫‪DVD2‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ‪‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‪ ,‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ‪) ...Configuring Anynet+ connection‬ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪ (Anynet+‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﻲ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺑﮑﺸﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫)‪Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻟﻐﻮ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺑﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﭼﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺭﻭﺵ ﺷﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺳﮑﻦ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺑﻮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪)Searching Connections‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ( ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻭﺭﻭﺩﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴١ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:30‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 41‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪(View TV‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Select Device‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﻭﺻﻞ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ)‪(Record‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Menu on Device‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ)‪(Device Operation‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺩﻫﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻭﻱ ﺩﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺤﻴﻂ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪Anynet+‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ‬
‫▲‪/►/◄/▼/‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪EXIT‬‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﻳﮏ ﻓﺎﻳﻞ‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﻧﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻳﮏ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫)ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻘﺐ(‬
‫)ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻠﻮ(‬
‫)ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫)ﭘﺨﺶ‪/‬ﻣﮑﺚ(‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪P‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪/‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪MUTE‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻬﻠﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻻﺕ ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪ ،Anynet+‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫‪W.LINK‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ REC‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﮑﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻱ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﭽﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺟﺮﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺿﺒﻂ )‪ (Record‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ TOOLS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٢ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:33‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 42‬‬
‫ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫‪P1‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Input‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩی(‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎی ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ‬
‫ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪(Anynet+(HDMI-CEC‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪)Receiver‬ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪:‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‬
‫ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪,(On‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻻ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪Enter‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ)ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺻﺪﺍ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﮑﻠﻲ ﺑﺎ ﺣﻖ ﭼﺎپ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻱ ‪ ،WISELINK‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮔﻮﺵ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﺵ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻳﺖ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ PIP‬ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺭﺧﻮﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻌﻤﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻂ ﻳﮏ ﮔﻴﺮﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﺻﺪﺍ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI/‬ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭﻳﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺮﺍﻳﻂ ﺧﺎﺻﻲ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪) .‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪(WISELINK‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﮐﻨﻢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ‬
‫)‪ Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ TOOLS‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﻮﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻴﺪ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﻢ ﺍﺯ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺷﻮﻡ‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪)View TV‬ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ SOURCE‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻫﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻳﮑﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ P, CH LIST, PRE-CH‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﮐﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻳﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﻧﺮ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ‪Anynet‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ‪…device +‬‬
‫ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﭘﻴﮑﺮﺑﻨﺪﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﻮﻳﭻ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ Anynet+‬ﭘﺨﺶ ﻧﻤﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺳﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫■‬
‫ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺭﺍ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ‪ (HDMI-CEC) Anynet+‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻨﻮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻳﻚ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ‪ +Anynet‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ١٫٣ HDMI‬ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ‪ HDMI‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﻤﻠﻜﺮﺩﻫﺎﻱ ‪ Anynet+‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﻜﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٣ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:34‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 43‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﮋﮔﻲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﮕﺎﻫﻬﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻧﻲ ﺧﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻛﺘﺒﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺪﻛﺲ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﺤﻮﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺍﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻫﺎﻱ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻫﻨﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻨﻜﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﻳﺎﻓﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺛﺒﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻳﻨﺼﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬
‫ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ )ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫)ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺩﻭﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻴﻤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﮑﺒﺎﺭ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻓﺸﺎ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ)ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺯﻣﻮﻧﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻣﻮﺯﺷﻲ(‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ )ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪/‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪/‬ﺯﺭﺩ‪/‬ﺁﺑﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪ FASTEXT‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﺳﺨﻦ ﭘﺮﺍﻛﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﭘﻮﺷﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﺪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ‬
‫ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ‪ ،‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻃﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﻣﻴﮑﺲ(‬
‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻫﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺨﺶ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺎﻟﺖ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ )‪.(LIST/FLOF‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ‪)LIST‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ( ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﮐﻤﻪ )ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ(‬
‫ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﺎﻻ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪﻱ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻳﻨﺪﮐﺲ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻳﻨﺪﻛﺲ )ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ( ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﮕﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﻜﻪ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﻨﺪ ﭘﻴﻮﻧﺪ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺷﺮﻭﻉ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻟﻐﻮ(‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﭘﺨﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺭﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪...‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴۴ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:36‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 44‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺷﺶ ﻃﺒﻘﻪ ﺑﻨﺪﻱ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺪ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﺨﺶ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻮﻳﺖ ﻛﺎﻧﺎﻝ ﭘﺨﺶ‬
‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﻭﻳﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺟﺴﺘﺠﻮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﺯ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ‪FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﻜﺴﺖ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﭼﻨﺪﻳﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﺮﻕ‬
‫ﺯﻳﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﻲ ﭘﻴﺪﺍ ﻛﺮﺩ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻳﻚ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺳﺮﺗﻴﺘﺮ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ )ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ‪(FASTEXT‬‬
‫ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ‪ TV‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻪ ﺗﮑﺴﺖ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴۵ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:38‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 45‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ) ‪( VESA‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺳﻘﻒ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺷﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﺟﺪﻱ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﻮﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫‪LCD-TV‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ )‪VESA. (A * B‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪26 ~ 23‬‬
‫‪100 * 200‬‬
‫‪M4‬‬
‫‪40 ~ 32‬‬
‫‪200 * 200‬‬
‫‪M6‬‬
‫‪52 ~ 46‬‬
‫‪57‬‬
‫‪70 ~ 57‬‬
‫‪400 * 800‬‬
‫‪~ 80‬‬
‫‪800 * 1400‬‬
‫‪58 ~ 42‬‬
‫‪PDP-TV‬‬
‫‪400 * 400‬‬
‫‪400 * 600‬‬
‫‪400 * 700‬‬
‫)‪ VESA‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪400 * 400‬‬
‫‪400 * 600‬‬
‫‪407 * 676‬‬
‫)‪ VESA‬ﻧﻴﺴﺖ(‬
‫‪70~63‬‬
‫‪400 * 800‬‬
‫‪~ 80‬‬
‫‪800 * 1400‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪M8‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪M8‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭﻱ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﮑﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺮﻳﺪﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﮏ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺡ ﻭ ﻫﻤﻪ ﻗﻄﻌﺎﺕ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭﻱ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺯﻳﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻧﺒﻨﺪﻳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻓﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻛﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻳﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Samsung‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻝ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﺎﻳﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ VESA‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﻛﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﭘﻴﺮﻭﻱ ﻧﻜﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ۵٧‬ﻭ ‪ ۶٣‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ‪ VESA‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺻﻲ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻴﺶ ﺍﺯ ‪ ١۵‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺷﻴﺐ ﻧﺪﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻧﻜﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻧﻲ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﻪ ﺷﻮﻙ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴۶ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:39‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 46‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ )ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﻓﺮﻭﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ(‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻴﻜﻪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﺗﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻨﻞ ﭘﺸﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ‬
‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ )‪ ١P‬ﺑﻪ ‪) (١P‬ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ(‬
‫ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲‪ ◄ ،▼ ،‬ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺣﻴﻦ ﺗﻤﺎﺷﺎﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻛﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻧﺸﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻣﻨﻮ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MENU‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﻣﻨﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ)‪(Setup‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ)‪External‬‬
‫‪ ,(Settings‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲ ﻳﺎ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭی ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ)‪Wall-Mount‬‬
‫‪ ,(Adjustment‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪۴‬‬
‫‪۵‬‬
‫‪TV‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪Plug & Play‬‬
‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻧﻮﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻮﺩی‬
‫ﺳﺮﮔﺮﻣﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺮژی‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ :‬ﻓﺎﺭﺳﯽ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺯﮔﺸﺖ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ▲‪ ► ،◄ ،▼ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻓﻠﺶ ﺩﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻫﻴﭽﮕﻮﻧﻪ ‪ OSD‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ INFO‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﮐﻤﻪ ◄ ﻳﺎ ► ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻪ)‪(Yes‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺁﺑﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ▲ ﻭ ▼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ,١‬ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ٢‬ﻳﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ٣‬ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺗﺎ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻛﻨﻮﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ RETURN‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮔﺰﻳﻨﺶ ﻳﻚ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ١‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪ ١‬ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺷﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ‪ OSD‬ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﺍﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‪3‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫‪ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ۴٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮ )‪ (WMN5090A‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٧ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:42‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 47‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻳﺎﺩﺁﻭﺭﻱ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫►‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪1‬‬
‫►‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﮐﺰی‬
‫►‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﭼﻄﻮﺭ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫►‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺣﻠﻪ ‪١‬ﻭﺭﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﻮﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻥ ﻳﻚ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﺭﻧﮕﻲ)ﻗﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﺳﺒﺰ‪ ،‬ﺯﺭﺩ( ﻧﺼﺐ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻗﺮﻣﺰ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ ،(١‬ﺳﺒﺰ )ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ (٢‬ﻭﻳﺎ ﺳﺒﺰ‬
‫)ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ‪ (٣‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻳﻜﻲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺒﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪،‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ ﻧﺎﭘﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻛﻪ ﺗﺄﻣﻴﻦ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﺮﺍﺟﻌﻪ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻄﻤﺌﻦ ﺷﻮﻳﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺷﺮﻛﺖ ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﺠﺮﺏ ﻣﺸﻮﺭﺕ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﻓﺘﺮﭼﻪ ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﻱ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﺳﻮﺍﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﻤﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﻳﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻟﻄﻔﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻧﺰﺩﻳﻜﺘﺮﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ +Anynet‬ﻳﺎ ‪ ،WISELINK‬ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﻛﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻝ ‪ ۴٢‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺪﻝ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻗﺪﻳﻤﻲ ﺗﺮ )‪ (WMN5090A‬ﺳﺎﺯﮔﺎﺭ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻌﻴﺖ‬
‫ﺫﺧﻴﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ‬
‫)ﺑﺴﺘﮕﻲ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﻴﭻ ﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻴﺘﻮﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻞ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺳﻄﺢ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻜﺲ ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﻴﮑﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻣﻲ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ) ( ﺩﺭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﭘﻴﭻ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﭘﻨﻬﺎﻥ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻄﺎﺭ‬
‫ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﺭﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﮑﻢ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻓﺘﺪ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺑﺪﻧﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻭ ﻧﻔﺮ ﻳﺎ ﺑﻴﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﻳﺴﺘﻲ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻤﻞ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﮔﺰ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ‬
‫ﺭﻭﻱ ﺯﻣﻴﻦ ﻧﺨﻮﺍﺑﺎﻧﻴﺪ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺻﺪﻣﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻤﻴﺸﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻳﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٨ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:46‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 48‬‬
‫ﻋﻴﺐ ﻳﺎﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻭﻳﺲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻭﺵ ‪ ،Samsung‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺯﻳﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺯﻳﺮ ﻧﻤﻲ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﻴﺪ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺣﻞ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺪﻝ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﺳﺮﻳﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻳﺎﺩﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻭﺷﻨﺪﻩ ﻣﺤﻠﻲ ﺧﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻤﺎﺱ ﺑﮕﻴﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﻢ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺩﻳﻮﺍﺭ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ )ﻧﻴﺮﻭ( )ﺭﻭﺷﻦ‪/‬ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﭘﻨﻞ ﺟﻠﻮ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ POWER‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﺭﺧﺸﻨﺪﮔﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻭﺷﻨﺎﻳﻲ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻳﺎﺑﻠﻨﺪﮔﻮﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ)‪ (TV Speaker‬ﺭﻭﺷﻦ)‪ (On‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻟﻲ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺻﺪﺍ ﺭﺍ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ MUTE‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﻴﺴﺖ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺳﻔﻴﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﻧﮓ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﻛﻴﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﭘﺨﺸﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺻﺪﺍ ﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺳﻌﻲ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺮﻗﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺷﻨﺎﺳﺎﻳﻲ ﻛﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺁﻧﺮﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭﺭﺗﺮ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺮﻳﺰ ﺑﺮﻕ ﺩﻳﮕﺮﻱ ﺑﺰﻧﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻧﺎﻭﺍﺿﺢ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮﻓﻚ ﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺻﺪﺍﻱ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺟﻬﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﻞ ﻭ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﮐﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻳﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻝ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﺗﻔﺎﻕ ﻣﻲ ﺍﻓﺘﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺘﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﺗﺎﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻛﺎﺭ ﻧﻜﺮﺩﻥ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎﻱ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻟﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻻﻳﻲ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ )ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩ ﭘﺨﺶ( ﺭﺍ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﻗﻄﺐ ﻫﺎﻱ ”‪ “+‬ﻭ ”‪ “-‬ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺑﻄﻮﺭ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺎﺗﺮﻱ ﻫﺎ ﺧﺎﻟﻲ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺶ ﺳﻴﺎﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﭼﺮﺍﻍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﮕﺮ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﺎً ﭼﺸﻤﻚ ﻣﻲ ﺯﻧﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻣﻮﺷﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺖ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻭﻳﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻳﻚ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻛﻠﻴﺪ ﻫﺎ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺳﻴﮕﻨﺎﻝ )‪ ،STB، DVD‬ﻏﻴﺮﻩ( ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻢ ﻣﺪﻳﺮﻳﺖ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﻲ ﻛﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ Source‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﭘﻨﻞ ﻳﺎ ﻛﻨﺘﺮﻝ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩ ﺩﻭﺭ ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺎﺭ ﺩﻫﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺧﺎﻣﻮﺵ ﻭ ﺭﻭﺵ ﻛﻨﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﻜﻦ)‪ (Just Scan‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﻌﻀﻲ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺁﺳﻴﺐ ﺩﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﮔﻮﺷﻪ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻫﺎﻱ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻮﻳﺰﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ "‪)"Resets all settings to the default values‬ﻫﻤﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ( ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﭘﻴﻐﺎﻡ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﻴﻜﻪ ﺩﻛﻤﻪ ‪ EXIT‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﺪﺗﻲ ﻧﮕﻪ ﻣﻲ ﺩﺍﺭﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﺎﻳﺎﻥ ﻣﻲ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﻳﺮ ﭘﻴﺶ ﻓﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺧﺎﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺮﻣﻲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۴٩ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:51‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 49‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ‬
‫‪PS50A550‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﺪﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ )ﻗﻄﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺍﻳﻨﭻ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﺕ ﺗﻔﻜﻴﻚ ﻛﺎﻣﭙﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪x 1080 @ 60 Hz 1920‬‬
‫ﺻﺪﺍ )ﺧﺮﻭﺟﻲ(‬
‫‪W + 15 W 15‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭ ﻋﻤﻖ(‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪X 770 X 1231 mm 95‬‬
‫‪X 831 X 1231 mm 320‬‬
‫ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎ ﭘﺎﻳﻪ‬
‫‪kg 37.4‬‬
‫‪kg 41.4‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺴﺖ ﻣﺤﻴﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬
‫ﺩﻣﺎﻱ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺮﺩﻥ‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 40‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ 50‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 104‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 80‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ -20‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 45‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﺳﺎﻧﺘﻲ ﮔﺮﺍﺩ )‪ -4‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 113‬ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ﻓﺎﺭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺎ ‪ 95‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻄﻴﺮ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻳﻦ ﺩﺳﺘﮕﺎﻩ ﻳﻚ ﻭﺳﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﻳﺠﻴﺘﺎﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﻪ ‪ B‬ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻃﺮﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﺎﺕ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻉ ﻗﺒﻠﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻲ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺑﺮﺍﻱ ﻣﻨﺒﻊ ﻧﻴﺮﻭ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺮﻑ ﺑﺮﻕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺒﻲ ﻛﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﻭﻱ ﻣﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻕ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺟﻮﻉ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﺳﻲ ‪۵٠ -‬‬
‫‪2008-03-17 ¿ÀÈÄ 4:30:51‬‬
‫‪BN68-01447E-Per.indb 50‬‬
Download PDF

advertising